Chevrolet Epica 2005 Owner Manual

2005 Chevrolet Epica Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Airbag System
......................................... 1-49
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-63
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-17
Mirrors .................................................... 2-29
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-31
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-33
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-30
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-47
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-33
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-11
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-39
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-39
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-45
Tires
...................................................... 5-46
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-68
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-75
Electrical System ...................................... 5-76
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-83
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-84
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, and the CHEVROLET Emblem are
registered trademarks; and the name EPICA is a
trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05EPICA A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster ..................................1-3
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-23
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-24
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-30
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-34
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-36
Top Strap ....................................................1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-44
Airbag System ...............................................1-49
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-52
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-54
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-55
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-56
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-56
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-58
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-62
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-63
Restraint System Check ..................................1-63
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-63
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-64
1-1
Front Seats
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster
The manual drivers seat tilt
adjuster knobs are located
on the outboard side of
the seat cushion.
Power Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, the eight-way power
seat controls are located on the outboard side of
the driver’s seat.
This allows you to move the seat up, down, forward or
rearward. It will also move the front or rear of the
seat cushion up or down, and tilt the seatback forward
or rearward.
Turn the front knob to adjust the tilt of the front portion
of the seat cushion. Turn the rear knob to adjust the
tilt of the rear portion of the seat cushion.
1-3
To adjust the power seat, do the following:
Move the seat forward or
rearward by pushing and
holding the switch
toward the front or rear of
the vehicle.
Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by pushing
the front part of the switch up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by pushing
the rear part of the switch up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by pushing the
entire switch up or down.
Adjust the angle of the seatback by pushing the upper
switch forward or rearward.
When the seat reaches the desired position, release the
switch.
1-4
Manual Lumbar
To adjust the driver’s
front seat lumbar support,
use the lever located
on the outboard side of
the seatback.
Push the lever down to adjust the support for the lower
part of the seatback.
Pull the lever up to return the support to its original
position.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats.
The buttons are located on
the center console above
the ashtray.
There is a button for the driver’s seat and a button for
the passenger’s seat. Press the appropriate button
to turn on the heated seat feature. The indicator in the
button will light when the feature is on. Press the
button again to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has a
manual reclining seatback
lever, it is located on
the outboard side of
the seat.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever and move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever and
push rearward on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Pull up on the lever and the seatback will go to an
upright position.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Push in the release button on the head restraint in order
to adjust the position downward.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chances of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull up the head restraint in order to adjust the
position upward.
1-7
The front head restraints
also tilt forward.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has a split folding rear seatback with a
center armrest. You can fold down either side of
the seatback to increase cargo space.
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback, do the following:
To tilt the head restraint, first put it in its upright position
by pushing it forward fully and releasing it. Then
slowly move the head restraint forward until it is in the
desired position.
To remove the head restraint, pull the head restraint all
the way up. Then push in the release button and lift
the head restraint from the guide sleeve.
1. Make sure that the front seats are not reclined. If
they are, the rear seatbacks will not fold down all
of the way.
2. Press down on
the release button
located on top of
the rear seatback.
Replace the head restraint and reset it in the original
position before driving.
3. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
1-8
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift up the seatback and push it to its original
position. Ensure that the safety belts are not twisted
or caught under the seat cushion.
2. Push down firmly on the top of the seatback until it
latches securely in the fully upright position.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-9
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-32.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-10
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-30. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-15
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-16
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, press the release button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without pressing the release button to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-24
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt
the latch plate and keep pulling until you can
buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-25
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-26
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-64.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-30
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-31
CAUTION:
(Continued)
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
CAUTION:
1-32
(Continued)
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-33
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-35
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has
straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield
may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped
shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a
flat pad which rests low against the child’s body.
A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that
are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings
up or to the side.
1-36
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Top Strap
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always to
be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-37
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-39. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
{CAUTION:
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
If the position you are using has an adjustable head
restraint, raise the head restraint and route the top strap
under it. See Head Restraints on page 1-7.
1-38
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Top strap anchors are already installed in your vehicle
for the rear seating positions.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in this position.
Squeeze and pull the front
part of the plastic cover
upward to access the
top strap anchors.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors for the rear outside seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
You will find the three anchors behind the rear seat on
the filler panel.
1-39
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-40
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
These labels are located at each lower anchor position,
near the base of the seat.
Child restraints and booster cushions that can be used
with the LATCH system are identified with label A.
{CAUTION:
A
B
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has either label A or B on the seatback.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-37.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-42
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-36.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-44
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-58
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34
for more information on this including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-37 if your child
restraint has one.
1-45
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-58. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
ON or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-34.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-46
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-47
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the rearview
mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned
to ON or START.
1-48
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers heaters
or massagers, located between the seat cushion and the
child restraint or small occupant, can affect how the
passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling/securing the child restraint or small occupant.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver and another frontal airbag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact
airbags. Side impact airbags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will
appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-49
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
Side impact airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to inflate only in
CAUTION:
1-50
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you
are too close to an inflating airbag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for airbag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-28 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-30.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information.
1-51
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-52
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
If your vehicle has one, the passenger’s side impact
airbag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest
to the door.
1-53
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). (The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
1-54
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.
See Airbag System on page 1-49. Side impact airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not likely help the
occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel
and instrument panel. For vehicles with side impact
airbags, the airbag modules are located in the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
1-55
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.
1-56
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the side of
the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, the airbag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or both
the airbag module and seatback for the driver’s and
right front passenger’s side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
1-57
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when you turn your ignition
key to ON or START. The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible on the rearview
mirror during the system check. When the system check
is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or
the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags (if equipped)
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-58
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-34.
1-59
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-44.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
1-60
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-61
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat
heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling or securing the child restraint or small
occupant. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-63 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-62
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the airbag system. If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step
Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-63
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-64
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt pretentioners and safety belt. Be sure to do
so. Then the new pretensioner and safety belt will be
there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
right front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies,
even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The
driver and right front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or
while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33.
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, the front
seat assembly must be replaced after the side
airbag has been deployed.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-9
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Trunk ..........................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-12
Power Windows ............................................2-13
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-14
Immobilizer ..................................................2-15
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-17
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-17
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-20
Parking Brake ..............................................2-24
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-26
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-27
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-27
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-28
Mirrors ...........................................................2-29
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-29
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-29
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-30
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-31
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-32
Storage Areas ................................................2-32
Glove Box ...................................................2-32
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-32
Coinholder(s) ................................................2-32
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-33
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-33
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-33
Sunroof .........................................................2-34
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
to start the vehicle. Even if a key has the same profile,
it will not start the engine if the electronic code is
incorrect. If you need a new key, contact your dealer
who can obtain the correct key code. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-5 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get
in. Be sure you have spare keys.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
key tag and gives it to the first owner. The tag has a code
on it that tells your dealer how to make extra keys. For
vehicle security, keep the key tag in a safe place and also
record the key number somewhere other than inside of
the vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be able to have
a new one made easily using the tag.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock
your vehicle using the
remote keyless entry
system:
V (Trunk): Press this button to unlock the trunk. The
horn will chirp twice to indicate that the trunk is unlocked.
The LED light on the transmitter will flash when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed.
The buttons, on the remote keyless entry transmitter,
will not operate and the theft-deterrent system will
not activate while the key is in the ignition. See
Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-14 for additional
information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
n (Lock/Unlock):
Press this button to lock all of the
doors. If all of the doors and the trunk are closed,
the hazard lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp
to indicate that locking has occurred and the
theft-deterrent system will activate.
Press the button again to unlock all of the doors. The
hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate that unlocking
has occurred and the theft-deterrent system will
deactivate.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of two
transmitters matched to it.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after unlocking the doors with the
transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock and
the theft-deterrent system will re-activate.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the LED light fails to
light or if the transmitter will not work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to get close to your
vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
detach the sticker from the unit. Keep the
sticker clean.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620, or
equivalent, type battery.
4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unit in
the cover.
5. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
6. Test the transmitter operation.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5.
To manually unlock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert the
key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
All doors, except the driver’s door, can be locked from
the outside by pushing down the manual door lock
and then closing the door. The driver’s door lock cannot
be pushed in while the door is opened.
Upon leaving the vehicle, the driver’s door can only be
locked from the outside by using the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-7
From the inside, you can lock or unlock all the doors
using the driver’s or the front passenger’s power
door lock switch. You can also lock or unlock all of the
doors by using the manual door lock knob on the
driver’s door.
Power Door Locks
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock located
on the window sill on each door.
From the inside, you can also lock and unlock the doors
with the power door lock switches located on the door.
Central Door Unlocking System
The central door unlocking system is activated from the
driver’s door.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all the doors
at the same time by using either the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-8
With the power door locks,
you can unlock or lock all
of the doors on your
vehicle using either the
driver’s or front
passenger’s door
lock switch.
Push down the right part of the switch to unlock the
doors. Push down on the left part of the switch to lock
the doors.
The driver’s door must be closed in order to lock the
doors. If the driver’s door is open while trying to lock the
doors using either of these switches, the doors will
not lock.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors on your
vehicle is not closed
properly, the door ajar light
on the instrument panel
cluster will come on
and stay on until the doors
are closed.
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lever upward to lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
Rear Door Security Locks
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
Your vehicle has rear door
security locks on each rear
door that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors on your
vehicle from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or older
children who ride in the rear will not be able to open the
rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how to cancel the locks.
2-9
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the lever downward to unlock.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent locking your key in the car.
The driver’s door can only be locked with the door
closed. From the outside of the vehicle, close the
driver’s door and lock it using the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to
take your key with you.
Trunk
To unlock the trunk from the outside, use the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches.
2-10
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-27.
Remote Trunk Release
Press the remote trunk
release button, located on
the driver’s door, to
release the trunk lid.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
Do not press the remote trunk release button while your
vehicle is moving because your trunk will open
whenever the remote trunk release button is pressed.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle down to open the trunk from the inside.
2-11
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-12
Window Lockout
Power Windows
The driver’s power window
controls also include a
lockout button.
The power window
switches are located
on the armrest on the
driver’s door. In addition,
each passenger door has a
switch for its own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON to use the power
windows. To lower a window, press down on the switch.
To raise a window, lift up on the switch.
The rear windows do not go all the way down.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window also has an express-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the switch all the
way down and then release it. The driver’s window will
then go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the switch
again. To raise the window, pull up and hold the switch.
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The driver
can still operate all the windows with the lock on.
Press the lockout button again to return to normal
window operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and swing
them to the side. Pull out the extensions located on the
inboard side of the sun visors to block out glare.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors located on the
back of the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor and lift
the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The light will
come on when the cover is opened. The light will go out
when the cover is closed.
2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock
the doors using the key or the manual door lock. It
activates only when you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK and remove the key from
the ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not operate the theft-deterrent system.
2. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and
the trunk.
Ensure that the windows are closed, as the system
can be activated even if the windows are open.
2-14
3. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter must be used to activate
the theft-deterrent system.
• The LED light on the transmitter will flash.
• All of the doors will lock.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will chirp.
• The theft-deterrent mode will arm.
• The security light will flash once every second to
indicate that the theft-deterrent system is armed.
The security light is located on the top center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of
the following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the lock/unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
Disarming the System
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
reactivate the theft-deterrent system.
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the lock/unlock button on the transmitter.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
− The LED light on the transmitter will flash.
− All of the doors will unlock.
− The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
− The theft-deterrent mode will disarm.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system with
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will re-arm.
Immobilizer
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk is opened without using the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will
sound and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
• Press the lock/unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
If the hazard lamps flash once when the lock/unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, the theft-deterrent system alarm was activated
while you were away.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-15
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents your vehicle from
being started by unauthorized persons.
If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, your vehicle
has a special key that works with the theft-deterrent
system. There is a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded. The correct key will start the
vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the engine. The
immobilizer system isolates the power supply to
the ignition system, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.
The engine immobilizer is activated after the ignition
is turned to LOCK and the key is removed from
the ignition. The security light located on the top center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield, will
flash when the immobilizer is active. If the light does not
flash after removing the key, have the system checked
by your dealer.
The immobilizer system works when you turn the key to
START. If the immobilizer system does not recognize the
electronic code, the engine will not start and the security
indicator will continue blinking. If your key is ever
damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
2-16
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light continues flashing, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition
off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-77. If the engine still does not
start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If
your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent
system to have a new key made.
Up to four keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a GM dealer can
service the theft-deterrent system to have new
keys made.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-5.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn the
key to four different
positions.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, for
the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-35 for more information.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
LOCK: This position locks your steering wheel, ignition,
shift lever and transaxle. This is the only position in which
you can insert or remove the key. For easier key
operation when unlocking the steering wheel, move the
steering wheel from right to left and turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories, such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan.
2-17
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But
even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch will return to
ON for normal driving. Do not turn the key to START
if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow
you to operate electrical accessories, such as the radio.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
2-18
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold
your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time
until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
not race your engine when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the
normal starting procedure.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very cold
weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You will get easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The automatic transaxle
has a shift lever located
on the console between
the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different positions for the automatic
transaxle.
The instrument cluster has a shift lever position
indicator that shows which position the shift lever is in.
This indicator is located on the top right side of the
instrument cluster.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the shift lever toward the passenger side while shifting.
This prevents you from changing positions unexpectedly
by blocking the straight movement of the shift lever
while the vehicle is moving. It is also necessary to
push down on the shift lever to shift from NEUTRAL (N)
to REVERSE (R).
2-20
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-25.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P)
while holding the brake pedal down, see Shifting Out
of Park (P) on page 2-26.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
must press down on the shift lever and push it toward
the passenger side of the vehicle while shifting.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift
to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving.
2-21
THIRD (3): This position gives you more power and
lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds over
65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the transaxle.
Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
2-22
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Adaptive Shift Logic
Your automatic transaxle will automatically select from
three adaptive shift patterns based upon driver behavior:
• Economy mode provides a softer shift feel and
optimizes fuel economy.
• Normal mode provides a solid shift feel and is used
for normal driving conditions.
• Sport mode provides a firm shift feel and optimizes
performance.
The driver cannot manually select the shift pattern. The
adaptive shift logic tries to operate in economy mode
as much as possible. Normal and sport modes are used
as little as possible in order to maximize fuel economy.
The first few shifts of every drive cycle may be
somewhat rough until the adaptive shift logic has
learned the driver’s behavior. This is normal.
The transaxle also has the ability to adapt to
changing road grade conditions. It will shift between
three different load settings:
• Load 1 is designed for driving on moderate
road grades.
• Load 2 is designed for driving on steep
road grades.
Press the button again to turn off hold mode, and return
to normal automatic transaxle operation.
While on, the HOLD indicator light on the instrument
panel will light up. See Hold Mode Light on page 3-39.
When hold mode is activated, the transaxle operates
in the following ways:
• When the transaxle is in AUTOMATIC
• Load 3 is designed for driving downhill and allows
for better engine braking.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transaxle,
the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD
indicator light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-41 or Hold Mode Light
on page 3-39.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
Hold Mode
OVERDRIVE (D), the transaxle operates in a gear
range of SECOND (2) to THIRD (3) to AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) and tries to maintain AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for as long as possible.
• When the transaxle is in THIRD (3), the transaxle
operates in a gear range of SECOND (2) to
THIRD (3) and tries to maintain THIRD (3) for as
long as possible.
• When the transaxle is in SECOND (2), the transaxle
is fixed in that gear.
Your vehicle’s transaxle has a hold mode.
• When the transaxle is in FIRST (1), the transaxle is
fixed in that gear.
Press the HOLD button
on the console below the
shift lever to turn on
hold mode.
Hold Mode Functions
Winter Function
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D), THIRD (3) or SECOND (2) to help the
vehicle maintain traction on slippery road surfaces,
such as snow, mud, or ice.
2-23
Avoid Excessive Shifting
Select hold mode while in THIRD (3) to avoid excessive
shifting when the adaptive shift logic is not enough to
prevent excessive shifting when driving in hilly areas.
Manually Controlling Shift
Select hold mode to use your automatic transaxle like a
four-speed manual transaxle.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release the parking brake prior to driving
away, a chime will sound to remind you to release
the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
2-24
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever up and toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P). If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-25
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding the
brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock release slot by
prying it off using a small, flat object. The shift-lock
release slot is located at the top of the shift lever.
4. Insert the key into the
shift-lock release slot
and press and hold
the key.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift-lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is turned to ON. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-20.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-26
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-27
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-27.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-24.
2-28
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-25.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
Mirrors
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror
When the automatic dimming feature is turned on, the
mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
the headlamps behind you. A photocell on the mirror
senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another
photocell built into the mirror face senses when
headlamps are behind you.
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip
the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to
side. The control at the bottom of the mirror is the
day/night feature that allows adjustment to the mirror so
that the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced. Push
the control for daytime use; pull it for night use.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare. This change may take
a few seconds. The mirror will return to its clear
daytime state when the glare is reduced.
To activate the automatic dimming feature, press the
button (B) located below the rearview mirror. To turn the
feature off, press the button (B) again.
The ignition must be turned to ON to use the automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The indicator light (C) will
illuminate while this feature is active.
There are two light sensors (A) which detect ambient
light level and glare from vehicles behind you. Do
not cover the sensors as this will cancel the automatic
dimming operation.
2-29
Outside Power Mirrors
The control for the
power mirrors is located
on the driver’s side
instrument panel, below
the side outlet.
Move the outside power mirror control to L for the left
mirror and to R for the right mirror. If you place the
control in the center position, no movement of the mirror
will occur. To adjust a mirror, press the corresponding
edges located on the four-way control pad to move
the mirror in the direction that you want it to go.
The ignition must be turned to ON to adjust the mirrors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat
against the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward
the vehicle.
2-30
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Coinholder(s)
When you operate the rear window defogger, the heated
driver’s and passenger’s outside power mirrors are
warmed to help clear them of ice and snow. See “Rear
Window and Outside Mirror Defogger” under Climate
Control System on page 3-19 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-22 for more information.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the
handle upward.
Cupholder(s)
The cupholders are located in the center console and in
the rear seat center armrest. To use the front
cupholders, press the right side of the lid which will
cause the flip lid to automatically open towards the left
side. To use the rear cupholder, pull down the rear
seat center armrest.
Your vehicle has a coinholder (A) located to the left of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel. There is also
a card holder (B) located at the top of the coinholder.
To use these feature, pull out the coinholder drawer.
2-31
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Center Console Storage Area
The center console has two separate storage areas.
The upper compartment is also the armrest. To open the
upper compartment, pull up on the left lever and lift
the lid. To open the lower compartment, pull up on the
right lever and lift the lid. To close the compartments,
push down on the lid until it latches securely.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle’s rear seat armrest contains two cupholders
and a rear console storage area. To access the
cupholders, pull the armrest down from the rear
seatback. To access the rear console storage area, pull
up on the lever and lift the lid. To close the storage
area, lower the lid and push it down until it latches.
The sunglasses storage compartment is located on the
headliner. To open the sunglasses storage
compartment, press the rear part of the cover. To close
the compartment, pull up and push it until it latches.
2-32
Sunroof
If your vehicle has this feature, the sunroof switch is
located on the headliner between the sun visors.
The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it can
be express-opened all of the way.
To fully open the sunroof, push the rear part of the
sunroof switch. The sunroof will open automatically,
along with the sunroof shade, until you push either the
front or the rear part of the switch again.
To close the sunroof, push the front part of the switch
and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof
will stop if the switch is released during operation. The
sunroof shade needs to be closed manually.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and
holding the switch until the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, first manually
open the sunroof shade and then push the front part
of the sunroof switch. To return the sunroof to its original
position, push the rear part of the switch and hold it
until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
2-33
✍ NOTES
2-34
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-5
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-7
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-7
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Dome Lamp .................................................3-16
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Map Lamps .................................................3-16
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Clock ..........................................................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-22
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-30
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-32
Tachometer .................................................3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ............................3-33
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-34
Charging System Light ..................................3-35
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-36
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-37
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-37
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-38
Traction Control System Active Light ...............3-38
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-39
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-41
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-44
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-45
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-45
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light ...........................................3-45
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-45
Trunk Ajar Light (Sedan) ................................3-46
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-46
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-47
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-47
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-48
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-51
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ...........................3-58
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-61
Radio Reception ...........................................3-61
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-61
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-62
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-62
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are
the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-30.
C. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 3-18.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-5.
E. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
F. Outside Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 2-30.
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-15.
H. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
I. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-31.
J. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
K. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-47.
L. Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray. See Ashtrays and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-18.
M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-31.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-5
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you
to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side
of the steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-7.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-7.
• Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13.
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
3-6
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to ON.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
Flash-to-Pass
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-77.
3-7
Windshield Wipers
INT (Intermittent): If equipped, turn the lever to this
position to choose a delayed wiping cycle.
Turn the center band on the windshield wiper lever
toward LO for a longer delay or toward HI for a shorter
delay. The wiper speed can only be adjusted when
the lever is in the INT position.
AUTO (Automatic Wiper with Rain Sensor): If
equipped, turn the lever to this position to operate the
windshield wipers automatically. The ignition must be on.
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition
must be turned to ON to operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High): Turn the lever to this position for wiping
at high speed.
LO (Low): Turn the lever to this position for steady
wiping at low speed.
3-8
The rain sensor detects the amount of water on the
windshield and automatically regulates the wipers. The
sensitivity of the system can be adjusted by turning
the center band.
Keep the rain sensor, located on the windshield behind
the rearview mirror, free from dust and dirt to ensure
proper operation.
OFF: Turn the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Misting Function
Windshield Washer
Move the lever toward, but not completely into, the
AUTO position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there
until the windshield wipers start; then let go. The
windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band toward AUTO longer.
To wash your windshield, pull the windshield
wiper/washer lever toward you with the ignition
turned to ON.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the lever, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three cycles
and will either stop or will resume at the speed you were
using before.
3-9
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain a
speed of about 18 mph (29 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 18 mph (29 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
turns off.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-10
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
The cruise control lever is
located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
1. Press the ON-OFF button to turn cruise control on.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on to show you that the cruise control is
on. See Cruise Control Light on page 3-45.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
3. Move the lever toward SET/COAST and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake pedal. This, of course,
shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset
it. Once you are going about 18 mph (29 km/h) or
more, you can briefly move the cruise control lever to
RES/ACC.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the lever to RES/ACC longer, the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the lever or apply
the brake pedal. So unless you want to go faster, do not
hold the lever at RES/ACC.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Move the cruise control lever to SET/COAST, then
release the lever and the accelerator pedal. You
will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise control lever to RES/ACC. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the lever. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, briefly move the lever to
RES/ACC and then release it. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by moving the cruise control
lever to SET/COAST.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Move the cruise control lever to SET/COAST
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly move
the lever to SET/COAST. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake pedal takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do
not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the ON-OFF button on the cruise
control lever.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-12
Exterior Lamps
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
If your parking lamps are on and you remove the
ignition key and open the door, they will automatically
turn off to prevent the battery from being discharged.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off,
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Auto-Off Headlamps
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
Your headlamps will automatically turn off when the
headlamps are on and you turn the ignition to ACC
or LOCK.
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
Headlamps on Reminder
23(Headlamps):
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
Your headlamps only work when your ignition is turned
to ON.
3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
• The parking brake is released.
3-14
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, parking
lamps and instrument panel lights will not be illuminated
unless you have turned the exterior lamps control to
the parking lamp or headlamp position.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on when the DRL are on. See Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light on page 3-45.
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is off.
The parking brakes are on.
The high-beam headlamps are on.
The low-beam headlamps are on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
If the parking lamps are left on, they will automatically
turn off when your key is removed from the ignition. This
protects the battery from being drained.
The button for the fog
lamps is located on the
center of the instrument
panel, above the front
ashtray.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light in the button will illuminate while the fog lamps
are on. Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned
to ACC or ON and the parking lamps or the low-beam
headlamps must be on.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them.
3-15
Dome Lamp
Entry Lighting
When you open either a front or a rear door, the door
step lamps inside your vehicle will turn on. The door step
lamps are located on the driver’s and front passenger’s
door trims. The lamps will turn off after you close all
of the doors.
Map Lamps
The switch on the dome lamp has three positions. The
ON position will turn on the lamp. The lamp will stay
on until it is manually turned off. The door, or middle
position will turn on the lamp whenever a door is
opened. The lamp slowly turns off after the doors are
shut. The OFF position will turn off the lamp completely,
even when a door is opened.
The map lamps are located on the headliner. To turn on
a lamp, press the button next to it. Press the button
again to turn the lamp off.
3-16
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle has an accessory power outlet. With an
accessory power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located on the front of
the center console below the front ashtray.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when
the ignition is turned to ACC or ON.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Clock
The front ashtray and cigarette lighter are located at the
lower part of the center instrument panel, behind a
cover. Press in the cover and it will automatically open.
Your vehicle has a digital clock located in the center of
the instrument panel. When the ignition is turned to
ACC or ON, the time is displayed in the digital clock.
There are three adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
To remove the front ashtray for cleaning, pull the bin
out. To replace, press the bin back into place.
The rear ashtray is located at the rear of the center
console. To remove the rear ashtray, press in the
retaining spring and pull the bin out. To replace the rear
ashtray, insert the bottom tabs first and then press in
the retaining spring and push the ashtray closed.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC or ON, push
the cigarette lighter in all the way and let go. When it
is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating.
3-18
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the
M button once. To go forward more than one minute,
press and hold the button until the correct minute
is reached.
S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour, press the
S button.
For example, if the set button is pressed while the time
is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.
If this button is pressed while the time is between 8:30
and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a manual climate control
system. With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
9(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
3-19
0 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
TEMP (Temperature): Turn the middle knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to the
blue area to get cool air and to the red area to get
warm air.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the right knob:
E (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
( (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
5 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. If your vehicle has rear outlets, some of the
air will also be directed to them. Be sure to keep the
area under the front seats clear to allow the flow of air to
the rear compartment.
The right knob can also be used to select the defog and
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
3-20
? (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more
quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode
on or off. When the button is pressed, an indicator
light in the button will come on. Using the recirculation
mode for extended periods may cause your windows
to fog. If this happens, select the defrost mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on and off. When A/C
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on
to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Press the A/C button.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Select one of these available modes from the
right knob.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
É (Defog):
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air is
also directed to the outboard outlets for the side
windows.
1. Select the bi-level mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the temperature.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side
windows.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
3-21
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle has a rear window and outside mirror
defogger. This feature will only work when the ignition is
turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
<T (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear
window and outside mirror defogger on or off. The
button is located below the audio system. An indicator
light in the button will come on to let your know that the
feature is activated.
The rear window and outside mirror defogger will turn
off about 10 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-22
Front Heated Windshield
Your vehicle may have a heated front windshield which
can be used to defrost it. This feature will only work
when the ignition is turned to ON.
There is a heated element along the bottom of the
windshield used to heat the windshield.
<T (Rear):
Press this button to heat the
windshield. The button is located below the audio
system. An indicator light in the button will come on to
let your know that the feature is activated.
The front windshield heater will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. It can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Automatic Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have an automatic climate control
system. With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
This is the display for the automatic climate control
system.
Automatic Operation
A. Selected
temperature
B. Defroster indicator
C. Air distribution
mode indicator
D. Air conditioning
indicator
E. Outside
temperature
display mode
indicator
F. AUTO mode
indicator
G. Outside air mode
indicator
H. Recirculation mode
indicator
I. Fan operation
indicator
J. Fan speed indicator
If your vehicle has this feature, do the following to set
automatic operation:
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode and the fan speed. The AUTO mode
indicator will appear on the display.
OFF: Press this button to turn the system off.
To set the desired temperature, do the following:
Press the AUTO button.
Turn the temperature control knob until the desired
temperature is displayed. You can set the desired
temperature between 64°F (18°C) and 90°F (32°C).
3-23
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the desired
temperature by 1°F (0.5°C). Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decrease the desired temperature
by 1°F (0.5°C).
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Manual Operation
w 9 x (Fan):
Press the up arrow to increase the
fan speed and the down arrow to decrease the fan
speed. AUTO mode is cancelled when this button is
pressed.
( (Bi-level):
This mode directs about half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
5 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. If your vehicle has rear outlets, some of the
air will also be directed to them. Be sure to keep the
area under the front seats clear to allow the flow of air to
the rear compartment.
The mode button can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
? (Recirculation):
MODE: Press this button repeatedly to cycle through
and choose the mode of air delivery into the vehicle. The
system will stay in the selected mode until MODE is
pressed again or until the AUTO button is pressed.
Press this button to keep outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle
or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation
mode on or off.
Whenever MODE is pressed, the display will show the
current system settings for five seconds before
returning the display to the exterior temperature.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select
the defrost mode.
E (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-24
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override
the automatic system and turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When A/C is pressed, the indicator
light on the display panel will come on to let you know
that it is activated.
Press this button again to turn the air conditioning
system off, or press the OFF button to turn the entire
system off.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, press the AUTO
button and the system will automatically enter
recirculation mode and the temperature will be at the
full cold position for maximum cooling.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Outside Temperature: To display the outside
temperature, press the temperature control knob.
Pressing this knob again will cancel the outside
temperature display, otherwise the display will return
to the temperature inside of the vehicle after about
five seconds.
The outside temperature sensor is located near the front
bumper, so the displayed temperature may be affected
by road or engine heat while the vehicle is idling or
traveling at slow speeds. For this reason, the displayed
temperature will be most accurate at speeds over
25 mph (40 km/h).
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-25
Sensors
The solar sensor (A) on your vehicle monitors solar
radiation and uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature by initiating needed adjustments
to the temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery
system. Do not cover the solar sensor located in
the center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
3-26
There is also a temperature sensor located beside the
audio system on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
This sensor reads the inside air temperature and helps
to establish ventilation system requirements while
operating in AUTO mode. Do not cover the temperature
sensor or the system will not work properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
É (Defog):
Press the MODE button until the defog
symbol appears on the automatic climate control system
display.
This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and
the floor outlets. A small amount of air is also directed
to the outboard outlets for the side windows.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
1. Select the bi-level mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the temperature.
1 (Defrost):
Press the defrost button to select the
defrost function.
Pressing this button directs the air to the windshield and
the outboard outlets for the side windows.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
To cancel defrost, press the MODE or AUTO buttons. If
you press the AUTO button, the system will operate
automatically.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle has a rear window and outside mirror
defogger. This feature will only work when the ignition is
turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
3-27
<T (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear
window and outside mirror defogger on or off. The
button is located below the audio system. An indicator
light in the button will come on to let you know that
the feature is activated.
The rear window and outside mirror defogger will turn
off about 15 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
Front Heated Windshield
Your vehicle may have a heated front windshield which
can be used to defrost it. This feature will only work
when the ignition is turned to ON.
There is a heated element along the bottom of the
windshield used to heat the windshield.
3-28
<T (Rear):
Press this button to heat the
windshield. The button is located below the audio
system. An indicator light in the button will come on to
let you know that the feature is activated.
The front windshield heater will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. It can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
located above the side outlets to turn them on and off.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
2. Unscrew and remove the three clips and the
access panel.
Your vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter.
It is located on the passenger side at the base of
the windshield and can be accessed through a
removable panel under the hood of the vehicle.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter, it may need
to be changed periodically.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Raise the hood.
3. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
4. Then reverse the steps to install the new air
filter and replace the access panel.
3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-30
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you
know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, how much fuel you
are using, and many other things you will need to drive
safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on the following pages.
3-31
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in kilometers.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays your engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of kilometers
traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer buttons
are located to the right of
the steering wheel
above the ignition switch.
You can cycle between the odometer and trip
odometers A and B by pressing the MODE button. By
pressing this button, you can tell how many kilometers
have been recorded on either Trip A or Trip B since
you last set the odometer back to zero.
Press the RESET button until zeros appear to reset
each trip odometer. The RESET button resets only the
trip odometer that is being displayed. Each trip
odometer must be reset individually.
3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the ignition is turned to ON
to remind people to fasten their safety belts. The tone
will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-49.
This light will come on for
about seven seconds
when you start your
vehicle. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on or keeps
flashing after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system and safety belt pretension
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate without a
crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced right away if
the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should come on for about
seven seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF,
or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
3-34
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat unless the airbag has been turned off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-58
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-33.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your GM dealer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-35
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
3-36
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle has an
anti-lock brake system,
this light will come on when
the ignition is turned to
ON and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. See
your GM dealer. If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36.
Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS) Warning Light
This warning light will
come on briefly when you
turn the ignition to ON
as a check to show you it
is working.
Then it should go out after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not come on, have it fixed so it
will be able to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on while you are
driving, the SSPS system may not be working. If this
happens, see your GM dealer for service.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-37
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), this light comes on
for a few seconds when
the ignition is turned to ON.
If the light does not come on, then have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The TCS warning light may also come on for the
following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS
button located below the shift lever, the light
will come on and stay on. To turn the system back
on, press the button again and the warning light
should go out.
• If there is a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the TCS will turn off and
the warning light will come on. If your brakes
begin to overheat, the TCS will turn off and the
warning light will come on until the brakes
cool down.
3-38
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, there may be a problem with your TCS and your
vehicle needs service.
When the TCS warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System Active
Light
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), the TCS active light
comes on while the
traction control function is
actively operating.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned to
ON. If the light does not come on, then have it fixed
so it will be ready to tell you when the system is active.
Traction Off Light
Hold Mode Light
If you have the traction
control system, this light
will come on when
the traction control system
has been turned off.
This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
to ON, if it does not the system may require service.
For more information on the traction off light, see
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will come
on when the hold mode
is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-20 for additional information
on this feature.
3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Your vehicle has an
engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition
turned to ON, this
gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
Tire Pressure Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system, this light
will come on if the
system detects low tire
pressure.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-22.
3-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and may cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
When the ignition is on, this light should come on and
should go out after a few seconds as a check to
show you it is working. If the light does not come on,
have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-41
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-42
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-43
Oil Pressure Light
If you have low engine oil
pressure, this light will stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by
your GM dealer.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
3-44
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light will illuminate
when the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are
activated. See Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) on
page 3-14.
Door Ajar Light
When the ignition is on,
this light will stay on until
all doors are closed
and completely latched.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-7
for additional information.
3-45
Trunk Ajar Light (Sedan)
This light will come on
when the trunk is not
completely closed.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-47 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the
ignition is on.
3-46
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
For your fuel tank’s capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-83.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on when
the fuel tank is low on fuel.
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of fuel remaining in
the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
Your Tank on page 5-8.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
3-47
Radio with CD (Base Level)
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this knob
again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
Playing the Radio
1. Turn the radio on.
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
3. Tune in the desired station.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for longer than two seconds. The
pushbutton number will flash on the display when
the station has been set. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set
will return.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
3-48
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the AST
button for longer than one second. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM-FM button to cancel automatic store.
equalization setting appears on the display. When
finished making the selection, press the SOUND button
to select the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display, then
press the SOUND button again to select the equalization
setting.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Then turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the
volume knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the balance level. When finished making the
selection, press this button to select the balance level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display. Turn
the volume knob to increase or to decrease the treble.
The display will show the treble level. When finished
making the selection, press this button to select
the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and
voice. Turn the volume knob until the desired
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the fade level.
3-49
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-50
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (SCAN): Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each CD inserted. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press this
button again. The current track will begin to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
Radio with CD (MP3)
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Playing the Radio
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this knob
again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-51
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for longer than two seconds. The
pushbutton number will flash on the display when
the station has been set. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set
will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for longer than one second. Once the
stations are stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the
first preset station will begin to play. FM-A will appear
on the display when listening to the automatic stored
stations. Press the AM-FM button to cancel automatic
store.
3-52
Press this button until TRE appears on the display. Turn
the volume knob to increase or to decrease the treble.
The display will show the treble level. When finished
making the selection, press this button to select
the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and
voice. Turn the volume knob until the desired
equalization setting appears on the display. When
finished making the selection, press the SOUND button
to select the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display, then
press the SOUND button again to select the equalization
setting.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the balance level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the fade level.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press this
button again. The current track will begin to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
3-53
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
3-54
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs,
40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs,
128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs,
and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album will be available when recorded using
ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a
large number of files and folders or playlists may
cause the player to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,
playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD
that was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the
depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep
down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback. If a CD contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Order of Play
Empty Directory or Folder
Tracks will be played in the following order:
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
3-55
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the
song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio will display the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, then MP3 will appear on the display. The CD
should begin playing. You can insert a CD with the
ignition off.
3-56
As each new track starts to play, F001, the track
number, and the song name will appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3, except for those listed here. See “Playing a
CD” earlier for more information.
5 DN (Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous directory.
CD Messages
6 UP: Press this pushbutton to go to the next directory.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
TRACK (Previous/Next File): Turn this knob
one notch to go to the first track in the previous or to go
to the next folder. The player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD with each turn of
the knob.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to
repeat the tracks in the current directory. DIR will appear
on the display.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
Press and release this button twice to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
Press and release this button again to turn off
repeat play.
try again.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-57
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
If your vehicle has the CD changer, you can play up to
6 CDs continuously. Normal size CDs may be played
using the trays supplied in the magazine. The smaller
3 inch (8 cm) CDs can be played only with specially
designed trays.
Notice: Placing heavy objects, which may shift or
slide while driving, in the trunk could damage
the CD changer. If your vehicle has the optional CD
changer, do not put heavy objects in the trunk.
3-58
Slide the door open, in the
direction of the arrow, on
the CD changer.
To eject the magazine
from the player, press
the eject button. The
magazine will
automatically eject.
Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible
to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.
To remove the CD trays,
press the CD tray button of
the tray that you want to
load, and carefully pull the
tray out.
The CD tray buttons are located on the right side. Load
each of the magazine trays. Each of the 6 trays holds
one CD. Load the trays from top to bottom, placing a CD
on the tray label side up. If you load a CD label side
down, the CD will not play and an error will occur. Gently
push the tray back into the magazine slot until it locks
into place. Repeat this procedure for loading up to
6 CDs in the magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. When
the door is closed, the changer will begin checking
for CDs in the magazine. This will continue for up to
one and a half minutes depending on the number of CDs
loaded.
Whenever a CD magazine with CDs is loaded in the
changer and the door is closed, the CD symbol
will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is
checking the magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash
on the display until the changer is ready to play. If CD
changer mode is entered during initialization, LOADING
will appear on the display. When a CD begins playing,
a CD and track number will appear on the radio display.
The CD numbers are listed on the front of the
magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons except for ejecting the magazine.
3-59
Playing a CD
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
TRACK (Reverse/Fast Forward): Turn this knob to
select the previous or next track on the current CD.
Push and turn this knob to quickly reverse or advance
within a track. As the CD advances, the elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to
the tracks on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
While in random, you can turn the tune knob to select
another track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
playing a CD. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the player for future listening.
5 DN (Previous): Press and hold this pushbutton to
select the previous CD in the magazine.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDC will appear on the display when the CD
changer has been selected.
6 UP (Next): Press and hold this pushbutton to select
the next CD in the magazine.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Press this button again to resume play.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
CD Messages
3 INT (Scan): To scan the tracks on the current CD,
press this pushbutton until INTRO appears on the
display. The first ten seconds of each track on the CD
will play. To stop scanning, press this pushbutton again.
No Maga: An empty magazine is inserted in the CD
changer. Try the magazine again with a CD loaded
in one of the trays.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-60
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this
feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. They
include the following:
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the radio on
and off.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
VOL w x (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
MODE: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,
radio, or CD.
Care of Your CDs
SEEK: Press and hold this button to go to the next
radio station and stay there.
Press this button to play stations that are programmed
on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-61
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If
the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception,
the antenna connector at the top-center of the rear
window needs to be properly attached to the post on
the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
3-62
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care
must be taken when cleaning the rear window because
it breaks in the resistive material heating element
and will adversely affect radio and defogger
performance. See your dealer for details.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-7
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
City Driving ..................................................4-19
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow ...................................................4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29
Towing ..........................................................4-33
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-34
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-35
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
4-3
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
4-4
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of
a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-6
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-7
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes to limit
wheel spin.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition is
turned to ON along
with the anti-lock brake
system warning light.
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position
you have chosen, so you should use the lower gears
only when necessary.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition is
turned to ON along
with the anti-lock brake
system warning light.
This light will blink when your Traction Control System
is limiting wheel spin.
When the system is on and the parking brake is fully
released, this warning light will also come on to let you
know if there is a problem.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. This light will also come on when the anti-lock
brake system is working.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
4-8
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
you should always leave the Traction Control System on.
But you can turn the system off if you prefer.
To turn the system on or
off, press the TCS button
located on the console
below the shift lever.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
When you turn the system
off, the Traction Control
System warning light
will come on and stay on.
If your vehicle has this optional steering system, the
steering system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
If the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button to turn the system off, the
warning light will come on, but the system will not
turn off right away. It will wait until there is no longer a
current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Traction Control System
warning light should go off.
4-9
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-8.
4-10
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-5.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
•
•
•
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-13
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-15
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-16
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could
be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-18
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-46.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-20.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they
have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-46.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has a traction control system (TCS), you will want
to slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the TCS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-8.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement.
4-25
See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-26
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-27
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-28.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-59.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-28
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in
gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that may free your vehicle. If that does not get you
out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If
you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the Maximum
Load weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on
your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific tire and loading Information label is
attached to the lower part of the center pillar (B-pillar) on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. The label shows the
seating capacity and the maximum load your vehicle can
properly carry. This label also shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tire size and the recommended tire
inflation pressure. For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 5-46 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-52.
4-29
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount printed on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from the maximum load amount,
shown in pounds and kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“maximum load” amount equals 1400 lbs and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
4-30
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Maximum Load
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum load weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum
load weight.
4-31
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) in
your trunk.
{CAUTION:
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
center pillar, near the driver’s door latch and tells you the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
4-32
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
4-34
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-21.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transaxle
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC.
3. Put the vehicle in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is
not designed or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer
can adversely affect handling, durability and fuel
economy.
4-35
✍ NOTES
4-36
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-11
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-19
Engine Coolant .............................................5-19
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-22
Engine Overheating .......................................5-22
Cooling System ............................................5-24
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-29
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-30
Brakes ........................................................5-31
Battery ........................................................5-34
Jump Starting ...............................................5-35
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-39
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-39
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-39
Headlamps ..................................................5-40
Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-41
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-42
Parking Lamps .............................................5-43
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-44
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-45
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-46
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-49
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-52
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55
Buying New Tires .........................................5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-58
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-58
Tire Chains ..................................................5-59
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-60
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-61
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-62
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-63
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-67
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-67
Appearance Care ............................................5-68
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-68
Vinyl ...........................................................5-70
Leather .......................................................5-70
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-70
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-70
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-70
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-71
5-2
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-71
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-71
Finish Care ..................................................5-71
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-72
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-72
Tires ...........................................................5-73
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-73
Finish Damage .............................................5-73
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-73
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-74
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-74
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-75
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-75
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-76
Electrical System ............................................5-76
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-76
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-76
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-76
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-76
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-77
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-77
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-79
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-83
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-84
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-27.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-41. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
5-6
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM
dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent
most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-8
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the release
lever located on the floor
on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. To remove
the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise).
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-71.
While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the
fuel door.
5-9
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-41.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-41.
5-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
2. Then go to the front of
the vehicle and locate
the secondary hood
release lever under
the front center of
the hood.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
3. Push the lever to the left as you lift up the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-24.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-29.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-30.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-31.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
H. Battery. See Battery on page 5-34.
I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-79.
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-44.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
If the oil is at or below the lower hole at the tip of the
dipstick (B), then you will need to add at least one quart
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-83.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole (A) that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range, between the holes on the
dipstick. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
5-14
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
5-15
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi,
or other commercial application.
5-16
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Open the latches that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
4. Put the cover back on tightly and close the latches.
See Using Your Maintenance Schedule on page 6-4
for replacement intervals.
5-18
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-22.
Have your dealer or service center change both the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −22°F (−30°C).
Give boiling protection up to 268°F (131°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235
may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235 labeled
automatic transaxle fluid.
5-19
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
coolant that meets GM specification 1825M, which will
not damage aluminum parts. You can also use a
recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M
with a complete coolant flush and refill. If you use
this coolant mixture, you do not need to add
anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-20
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant surge
tank is located in the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the
MAX (A) and MIN (B) marks on the coolant surge
tank. The level rises at engine operation temperature
and drops again when the engine cools down.
Adding Coolant
If the level falls below the MIN (B) mark, add the proper
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Cooling System on
page 5-24 for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to
the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-21
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-40.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-22
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-23
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Make sure that the
air conditioning is turned off.
The coolant level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the coolant surge tank when the engine
is cool.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-24
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If
the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If
it is not, your vehicle needs service.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not between the MIN and
MAX marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and proper coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for more information.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
5-25
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-26
{CAUTION:
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
5-27
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the MAX mark, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
MAX mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the MAX mark on the coolant surge tank. Wait
about five minutes, then check to see if the level is
below the MAX mark. If the level is below the
MAX mark, add additional coolant to bring the level
up to the MAX mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the MAX mark
for at least five minutes.
5-28
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap.
4. Add power steering fluid to the appropriate level.
5. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
The level should be
between the MIN (B) and
MAX (A) marks.
If the level drops to or below the MIN (B) mark,
add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the
MAX (A) mark.
5-29
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-25. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to
use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage
hoses and seals.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-30
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-36.
5-31
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-25.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-32
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-68.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
5-33
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery
location.
5-34
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-35 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-35
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (−) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Flip the caps up to access the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-36
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move. The
electrical connection is
just as good there,
and the chance
of sparks getting back
to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-37
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
caps to their original positions.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-38
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-44.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam
headlamps may be necessary if it is difficult to see
the lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to
be re-aimed, we recommend that you take your
vehicle to your dealer for service.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
5-39
Headlamps
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
5. Remove the headlamp cap.
6. Disconnect the two wiring harness connectors
located on each side of the headlamp assembly.
7. Remove the old bulb.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the headlamp assembly.
4. Release the two wire bars that retain the headlamp
cap by pushing them outward.
5-40
• To remove the high-beam headlamp bulb,
release the spring that retains the bulb.
• To remove the low-beam headlamp bulb, turn
the bulb counterclockwise.
8. Install the new bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
• To replace the high-beam headlamp bulb, install
the bulb retaining spring.
• To replace the low-beam headlamp bulb, turn
the bulb clockwise.
9. Connect the wiring harness connector to the bulb
and replace the headlamp cap.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
To replace a front turn signal lamp (A) bulb, do the
following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Reach behind the headlamp assembly to locate the
front turn signal bulb socket.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
bulb socket.
5-41
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
1. From inside the vehicle, locate the center
high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL) housing on the
underside of the rear window shelf.
4. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out of the lamp housing.
5. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
6. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall.
2. Pry off the lamp housing with a flat tool.
3. Remove the bulb socket.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb socket.
5-42
5. Install the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the CHMSL.
7. Push the CHMSL housing back into its original
position.
Parking Lamps
To replace a parking lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Reach in the
underside of the front
bumper and turn
the bulb socket
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the bulb
socket.
2. Pull the bulb socket out of the front bumper.
5-43
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Open the trim cover by releasing the clip at the top
of the cover.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing the
bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Twist the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
7. Close the trim cover.
Replacement Bulbs
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp
5-44
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Front Parking/Turn Signal
Headlamp
High-beam
Low-beam
Sidemarker, Front and Rear
Stoplamp/Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps
Bulb Number
94535571
94535587
94535574
94535541
94535546
94535587
94535574
94535572
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-19 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-45
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
5-46
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-29.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all
tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-52.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-56.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
5-47
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-67 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-60.
5-48
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The
load range represents the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum
speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
5-49
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
5-50
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-56.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
5-51
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-52
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-67.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-53
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29 for an example of the tire and loading
information label and where it is located on your vehicle.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-83.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-58 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-54
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-61.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-55
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the tire and loading information label attached to your
vehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29
for a label example and where it is attached to your
vehicle.
Make sure the replacements are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-67.
5-56
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
selection width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear,
traction and temperature performance. (This applies
only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-57
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-58
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-61 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
5-59
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would;
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-60
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-61
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
The spare tire and tools you will need are located in
the trunk.
2. Lift and remove the trim cover.
3. Turn the retainer on
the spare tire
counterclockwise and
remove the retainer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Jack Handle
Screwdriver
5-62
4. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-67 for more information.
5. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench. Your vehicle’s jack is stored in a foam
tray in the left side of the trunk. The tools are stored
in a bag in the trunk near the spare tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen the four
plastic caps by hand or by using the wheel
wrench. The plastic nuts do not come off.
2. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of the
jack handle or the screwdriver. Pry along the edge
of the wheel cover until it comes off.
4. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheel
which the jack head fits in.
5. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-63
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
7. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
5-64
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit underneath the wheel well.
9. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
10. Remove the flat tire.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
12. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
13. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-65
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-83 for wheel nut
torque specification.
5-66
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-83 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools, do the
following:
1. Store the flat or compact spare tire in the spare tire
compartment.
2. Place the tire in the compartment, then secure the
retainer.
3. Store the jack in its foam tray in the trunk.
4. Store the tools securely in the trunk.
5. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-67.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-67
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others —and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-68
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
5-69
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-70
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Glass should be cleaned often. Your GM dealer can
provide an approved cleaner, or a liquid household glass
cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-74.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-71.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-74.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-74. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-71
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-72
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-73
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
5-74
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Removes
light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
5-75
Service Parts Identification Label
Headlamp Wiring
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.
5-76
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Five spare fuses are provided in the engine
compartment fuse block. If you ever have a problem
on the road and do not have a spare fuse, you
can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick
a feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use
its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon
as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the
instrument panel fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
driver’s side end of the instrument panel. To access the
fuses, grip the back end of the fuse panel door and
open by pulling the cover out.
There is a fuse puller located on the engine
compartment fuse block. It can be used to easily
remove fuses from the fuse block.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs at the front end
first, then push the door into the end of the instrument
panel to secure it.
5-77
Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
FUSE PLR
ECM
BCK/UP
CRUISE
TPMS
AUTO A/C
BCM
HVAC
EPS
AIRBAG
ABS
TCM
BTSI
BCM
ABS
5-78
Usage
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Engine Main Relay, Fuel Pump
Relay, Engine Control
Module (ECM)
Back-Up Lamp Switch,
Cruise Control
Tire Pressure Monitor
System (Option)
Automatic Temperature Control,
A/C Compressor Relay, Body
Control Module (BCM)
Manual Air Conditioning, Electronic
Power Steering (EPS) (Option)
Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) (Option)
Anti-lock Brake System (Option)
Transmission Control Module
(TCM), Brake Transmission
Shift-Interlock/Automatic Transaxle
Shift-Lock (BTSI)
Body Control Module (BCM),
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Fuses
CLSTR
AUTO A/C
LTR
RADIO
CLK
WSWA
WPR
HTD/MIR
RADIO
CRUISE
HTD/SEAT
AUTO A/C
CLSTR
DLC
Usage
Instrument Panel Cluster, Automatic
Temperature Control, Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL)
Cigarette Lighter, Glove Box Lamp
Radio
Clock, Dome Lamp, Key
Interlock Unit
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wiper
Outside Rearview Mirror (OSRVM),
Rear Glass Defogger Switch
Radio Battery Positive Voltage,
Cruise
Heating Mat, Accessory Power
Outlet
Automatic Temperature Control,
Cluster
Data Link Connector (DLC)
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location. To access the fuses, press the
top and bottom flaps to release the cover.
To reinstall the cover, push until it is secure.
5-79
5-80
Fuses
BLANK
LOW BEAM RT
LOW BEAM LT
INT LTS
A/C
HI BEAM
PASSING
HI BEAM
Usage
Not Used
Right Side Headlamp Low Beam
Left Side Headlamp Low Beam
Interior Lamp
Air Conditioning
Headlamp Passing Light
Headlamp High Beam
Fuel Pump, Data Link
FUEL
Connector (DLC)
ECM
Ignition Coil
COOL FAN HI Electric Cooling Fan High Speed
BCM BATT
Body Control Module (BCM)
IGN 1
Ignition Key (ACC, ON, START)
FOG LAMPS Fog Lamp Relay
STOP LAMPS Brake Switch
I/P FUSE BATT Instrument Panel Fuse Box
ILLUM RT
Illumination, Right Parking Lamp
FRT DEFOG Front Defogger
ILLUM LT
Left Parking Lamp
HVAC BLWR Blower Motor
IGN 2
Ignition Key (ON, START)
FOG DIODE Fog Lamp Relay
HORN
Horn
Fuses
PWR/MIR
DRL
ENG 2
ENG 1
COOL
FAN LOW
ABS
PWR/SEAT
S/ROOF
ECM 1
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PWR WNDW
FUSE PLR
Usage
Power Mirror
Daytime Running Lamps
Injector, Variable Induction
System (VIS), Electronic Exhaust
Gas Recirculation (EEGR), Canister
Purge Solenoid
Oxygen Sensor, Generator, Engine
Control Module (ECM)
Electric Cooling Fan Low Speed
Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM)
Front Power Seat
Sunroof
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Engine Main Relay
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Power Window
Fuse Puller
5-81
Relays
COOL FAN HI
A/C CMPRSR
HEAD LAMP
COOL FAN
CNTRL
FRT FOG
HORN
5-82
Usage
Electric Cooling Fan High Speed
Air Conditioning Compressor
Headlamp
Electric Cooling Fan Control
Front Fog Lamp
Horn
Relays
ILLUM LAMPS
FUEL PUMP
COOL
FAN LOW
PWR WNDW
ENG MAIN
Usage
Taillamp
Fuel Pump
Electric Cooling Fan Low Speed
Power Window
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Ignition Coil
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-25 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
1.6 lbs
0.73 kg
Cooling System
8.7 quarts
8.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.8 quarts
6.4 L
Fuel Tank
16.6 gallons
63.0 L
Transaxle, Automatic
7.8 quarts
7.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 ft lb
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Application
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.5L L6 (DOHC)
L
Automatic
0.030 inch (0.80 mm)
5-83
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco®
Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
96332566
—
Engine Oil Filter
96389188
—
Fuel Filter
96335719
—
A/C Filter
96296618
—
Spark Plugs
96417176
—
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
96342895
96220735
—
—
Part
5-84
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-7
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-14
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-19
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-19
At Least Once a Month .................................6-19
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-20
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-20
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-23
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-23
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-23
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-24
Brake System Inspection ................................6-24
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-25
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-27
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your GM dealer’s service department do
these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported
service people that will perform the work using genuine
GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive short distances only a
few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belts Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Brake Fluid Change (or 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Filter Replacement.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belts Inspection.
6-6
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Brake Fluid Change (or 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Filter Replacement.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
Footnotes
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-8
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
6-9
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-10
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
solenoid valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
6-11
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-12
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
6-13
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-24.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-14
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid valve
filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
6-15
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
6-16
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
solenoid valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid valve
filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-17
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
6-18
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-19 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-30 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-46 for further
details.
6-19
At Least Twice a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Restraint System Check
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-25.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5-72.
Automatic Transaxle Inspection
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
6-20
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-24 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-21
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-22
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-27.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-23
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-24
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water (preferably distilled)
and good quality Ethylene
Glycol Base Coolant
Part No. U.S. 12378560, in
Engine Coolant (GM
Canada 993089) and conforming to
GM Specification 1825M or recycled
coolant conforming to GM
Specification 1825M. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Power Steering Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
System
on the label.
Automatic
Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ESSO
LT 71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235
(GM Part No. in Canada 89021903).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-25
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
6-26
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-27
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-29
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-30
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ..........................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
7-5
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
7-6
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone
call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five-day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
GM dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your GM dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-8
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-11
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
7-12
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-63
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-76
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-19, 3-22
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-34
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-49
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-63
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-56
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-58
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-62
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-55
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ..... 1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-52
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-62
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-37
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-68
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-72
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-71
Appearance Care (cont.)
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Backglass Antenna ......................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD .................................... 3-48,
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
5-68
5-71
5-73
5-70
5-70
5-70
5-70
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-74
5-70
5-71
5-71
5-72
3-18
3-47
3-61
3-62
3-62
3-61
3-51
3-58
3-61
3-22
5-19
2-20
1
B
C
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-62
Battery .......................................................... 5-34
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-15
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-7
Parking ...................................................... 2-24
System Inspection ....................................... 6-24
System Warning Light .................................. 3-36
Brakes .......................................................... 5-31
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-7
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-17
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-39
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-42
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-41
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-39
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-39
Headlamps ................................................. 5-40
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-44
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-83
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-10, 2-27, 4-24, 4-35
Care of
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-62
Your CDs ................................................... 3-61
CD Changer, Trunk-Mounted ............................ 3-58
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-32
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-42
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-59
Charging System Light .................................... 3-35
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-41
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-11
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-74
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-34
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-30
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-42
2
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Climate Control System ...................................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Automatic ...................................................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
1-42
1-44
1-37
1-39
1-36
3-18
5-72
5-71
5-68
5-71
5-70
5-70
5-70
5-70
5-73
5-73
5-70
5-71
5-71
5-72
3-19
3-29
3-22
3-28
Clock ............................................................ 3-18
Coinholder(s) .................................................. 2-31
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-67
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-22
Cooling System .............................................. 5-24
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-45
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-31
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
3
D
E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-45
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-45
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Seat Tilt Adjuster ........................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-15
City ........................................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-20
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-28
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-76
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-79
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-77
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-76
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-77
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-76
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-76
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-17
Battery ....................................................... 5-34
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-41
Coolant ...................................................... 5-19
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-19
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-40
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-23
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-27
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheating ................................................ 5-22
Starting ...................................................... 2-18
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-27
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-15
4
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-73
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-60
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-61
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-67
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19
Power Steering ........................................... 5-29
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-30
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-46
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-47
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-79
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-77
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-77
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-76
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40
Fuel .......................................................... 3-46
Speedometer .............................................. 3-32
Tachometer ................................................. 3-32
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-31
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-5
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-39
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-76
Headlamps .................................................... 5-40
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-39
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-7
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-41
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-39
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-7
On Reminder .............................................. 3-13
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
5
Heater ................................................... 3-19, 3-22
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-45
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hold Mode Light ............................................. 3-39
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-11
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-35
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
I
Ignition Positions .............................................
Immobilizer ....................................................
Immobilizer Operation ......................................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
Inspection
Brake System .............................................
Engine Cooling System ................................
Exhaust System ..........................................
Fuel System ...............................................
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal ..................................
Throttle System ...........................................
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel (cont.)
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-30
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
2-17
2-15
2-16
1-30
5-52
6-24
6-23
6-23
6-23
6-23
6-23
6-24
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Dome ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Fog ...........................................................
Map ..........................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
5-47
3-16
3-13
3-15
3-15
3-16
1-39
1-42
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-37
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-36
Charging System ......................................... 3-35
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-45
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-45
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-45
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-45
Hold Mode ................................................. 3-39
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-47
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-41
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-44
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-34
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ........................... 3-33
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-37
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-38
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-40
Traction Control System Active ...................... 3-38
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-38
Traction Off ................................................ 3-39
Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-46
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-16
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Locks (cont.)
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-14
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-47
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-84
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-19
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-19
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-20
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-20
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-24
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-23
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-23
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-19
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-23
7
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-25
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-27
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-7
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-23
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-24
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-41
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-29
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-29
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-30
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-31
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-30
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-84
8
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-32
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-44
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-30
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-31
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-30
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-25
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-26
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-24
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-27
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-19
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-23
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-25
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-27
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-34
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-29
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-58
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ......................................... 5-76
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-29
Windows .................................................... 2-13
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-27
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-47
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-62
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-61
Radio with CD .................................... 3-48, 3-51
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer .......................... 3-58
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-61
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-32
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-24
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-29
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-29
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-34
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-63
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-62
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-44
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-10
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-63
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-64
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-63
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-64
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-23
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-28
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-28
9
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-27
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32
Reminder Tone ............................................ 3-33
Safety Belts
Driver Position ............................................ 1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-14
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-24
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-23
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-22
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster ................................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-42
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
10
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-41
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-62
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-73
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-26
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-7
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-22
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Installing .................................................... 5-63
Removing ................................................... 5-62
Storing ....................................................... 5-67
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-83
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ............................................. 3-37
Speedometer .................................................. 3-32
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-23
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-61
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-32
Coinholder(s) .............................................. 2-31
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-31
Storage Areas (cont.)
Glove Box ..................................................
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ..................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-31
2-32
2-32
4-28
2-13
2-33
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-32
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-44
TCS Active Light ............................................. 3-38
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-38
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-15
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-16
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-24
Tilt Adjuster, Driver Seat .................................... 1-3
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time ............................................................. 3-18
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-40
Tires ............................................................. 5-46
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-72
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56
Chains ....................................................... 5-59
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-61
Tires (cont.)
Cleaning .................................................... 5-73
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-67
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-60
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-52
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-54
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-63
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-63
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-62
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-67
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-49
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-58
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-58
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-55
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-34
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-35
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-33
Traction
Control System Active Light .......................... 3-38
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-38
Off Light ..................................................... 3-39
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
11
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-20
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-32
Trunk ............................................................ 2-10
Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-46
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ............................. 3-58
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-56
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-75
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-76
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
12
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-5
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-58
Replacement ............................................... 5-58
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36
Windows ....................................................... 2-12
Power ........................................................ 2-13
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-72
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-30
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-45
Fuses ........................................................ 5-76
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2